<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Twa</id>
	<title>innovaphone wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Twa"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Twa"/>
	<updated>2026-05-09T09:06:42Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.3</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17094</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17094"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T12:45:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor version 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed below the extension and name as shown in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX as soon as the application is started-up and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed below the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17093</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17093"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T12:24:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor version 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed below the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX as soon as the application is started-up and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17092</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17092"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T11:19:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor version 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed below the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX as soon as the application starts up and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17091</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17091"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T11:19:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed below the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX as soon as the application starts up and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17088</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17088"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T10:33:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed below the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17087</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17087"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T10:31:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 supports the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color from silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed behind the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17086</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17086"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T10:11:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]] and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software analyses up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialed number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialed numbers are threaded from the phone like manually dialed numbers and so for example you will find the dialed number in your phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is on and available, too. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialed number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or re-dial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial but you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialing plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialing plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example these fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are effective immediately. This allows you to change the IP address of your phone swiftly, if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you, phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the phone are running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality makes it possible to copy a text to the clipboard with the mouse and then to dial out. And so click-to-dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click-to-dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17085</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17085"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T10:02:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]] and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software analyses up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialed number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialed numbers are threaded from the phone like manually dialed numbers and so for example you will find the dialed number in your phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is on and available, too. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialed number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or re-dial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial but you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialing plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialing plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example these fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are effective immediately. This allows you to change the IP address of your phone swiftly, if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you, phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the phone are running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17084</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17084"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T09:14:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard to the PC keyboard which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to manipulate the hard- and software keyboard. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and even special Num-Blocks are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course only the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince it that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download the file directly from here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17083</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17083"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:44:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard to the PC keyboard which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to manipulate the hard- and software keyboard. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and even special Num-Blocks are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course only the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince it that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17082</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17082"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:41:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard tothe PC keyboard which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to manipulate the hard- and software keyboard. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and even special Num-Blocks are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course only the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17081</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17081"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:32:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard tothe PC keyboard which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to manipulate the hard- and software keyboard. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Blocks available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17080</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17080"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:22:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard than the PC keyboard which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to manipulate the hard- and software keyboard. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Blocks available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17079</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17079"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:19:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard than the keyboard of the PC which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the phone set one, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to do a hard- and software keyboard manipulation. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Block available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17078</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17078"/>
		<updated>2010-04-12T08:11:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard than the keyboard of the PC which means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the one of the Phone set, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to do a hard- and software keyboard manipulation. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Block available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17035</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17035"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T10:10:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: /* Description */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in an active window a lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled Sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 support the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color form silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed after the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17033</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17033"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T10:05:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in a active window a Lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled Sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 support the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color form silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed after the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher than”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will also display executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get the configuration changes from the PBX in real-time it is necessary to create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put the query user in that group too and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the color has been selected it will be shown in the preview filed near the button. If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top a special color can be defined for a special presence status. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which sets-up one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17027</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=17027"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:58:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lamp field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor vesion 1.20 is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The default colors are yellow for call setup, red for alerting, green for connected and white for presence. The call status works for innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, and analogue sets, the presence status just for innovaphone devices. SIP Phones are not supported.  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the entire screen is available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in a active window a Lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled Sets are displayed with white foreground characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), if the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.20 support the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color form silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black. Notes are displayed, but a note will not change the presence status, just an active Presence status will trigger the status color.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed after the extension and name like in following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has a presence message, too:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor_120.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC01.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. &lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
The &lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher then”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show Executive User” will display also executive user which are hide by default.&lt;br /&gt;
To get in real-time the configuration changes from the PBX it is necessary create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT put mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put also the query user in that group and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colors of the lamp can be defined in the configuration. For each status (Idle, setup, call, busy and presence) the background color can be selected. To select a color just press the button of the status and the usual windows color scheme popup will appear(in the example you see the screen of windows  in German language, of course the popup will appear in the language installed on the PC).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected the color it will be show in the preview filed near the button.  If you press the button “Reset to -&amp;gt;” all colors will return to the default values shown in the right color Colum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On top for a special presence status can be defined a special color. Just select one status from the list and set a particular color for this status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CMC03.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which setup one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17026</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17026"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:43:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialed number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialed numbers are threaded from the phone like manually dialed numbers and so for example you will find the dialed number in your phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialed number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial but you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialing plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialing plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example these fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are effective immediately. This allows you to change the IP address of your phone swiftly, if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you, phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the phone are running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17025</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17025"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:30:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialed number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialed numbers are threaded from the phone like manually dialed numbers and so for example you will find the dialed number in your phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialed number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialing plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialing plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are effective immediately. This allows you to change the IP address of your phone swiftly, if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17024</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17024"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:26:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialed number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialed numbers are threaded from the phone like manually dialed numbers and so for example you will find the dialed number in your phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialed number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialing plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialing plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are effective immediately. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17023</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17023"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:10:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse up to 200 characters of the marked text starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17022</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17022"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:08:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated into 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17021</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17021"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:06:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial looks for a number in the clipboard of your PC, corrects it and sends the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C copies the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copying text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17020</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17020"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T09:00:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that enables calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17019</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=17019"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T08:59:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: /* Applies To */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Built 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17018</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17018"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T08:57:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard than the keyboard of the PC and that means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the one of the Phone set, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to do a hard- and software keyboard manipulation. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Block available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new keyboard layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” keyboard layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17009</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17009"/>
		<updated>2010-04-07T08:32:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: /* More Information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different to dialing from a phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefers using the phone keyboard than the keyboard of the PC and that means constant toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the one of the Phone set, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to do a Hard- and Software keyboard manipulation. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Block available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new Keyboard Layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” Keyboard Layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17007</id>
		<title>Howto:Fit a PC Keyboard Layout to telephony use</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Fit_a_PC_Keyboard_Layout_to_telephony_use&amp;diff=17007"/>
		<updated>2010-04-06T12:57:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: /* More Information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to Operator and any other application using a PC keypad for dialing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Keyboard USB Operator keytweak --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
If a PC Keyboard is used for telephony (typically the operator) the user has a frontend which is different to the telephone one.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why? Well, look at this: This is the layout of a phone set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 1 to 0, so a &amp;quot;123-456-789-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this is the keyboad of the number-block on a PC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PC1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers go from 7 to 0, a &amp;quot;789-456-123-0&amp;quot; keyboard layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see “456” is identical, but “123” should be “789”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So dialing using the keyboard is very different then dialing from a Phone set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result: the operator prefer using the phone keyboard than the keyboard of the PC and that means always toggling from one keyboard to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it would be nice to have a Dial-Keyboard which is identical to the one of the Phone set, something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TFT1.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve that we have to do a Hard- and Software keyboard manipulation. Here is how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hardware===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardware part is very easy: just remove the keycaps and put them on in another way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:P02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe the angle of the cap is not perfect, but that is not a real problem and depends on the keyboard design. USB keyboards are very common and there are even special Num-Block available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And here we are, your new and telephony compliant keyboard!&lt;br /&gt;
But of course just the labeling has changed. Now, we have to force the PC and convince him that &amp;quot;7&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Software===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have to know that in reality the keyboard just sends a number to the PC, the number of the key. For example a keyboard communicates that key number 91 is pressed (and not character &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;). In all applications this key number “91” stands for character number “7” and is mapped by the PC or better, by the operating system. In Windows the mapping can be manipulated as you like because mapping is defined in the registry!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In start up the operating system reads out the registry and maps the keyboard.  The nice thing: the common keyboard layout for the different languages is done on a higher level. Therefore, if we change the layout on the lowest level even a change in the language layout will not change our setup. And the new map is active even if you switch from a German to English keyboard for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the remapping of the keyboard is easy, but you have to manipulate the registry of your PC. We recommend doing that not directly with regedit but using the tool described. Please note that the registry is a sensitive area of your PC, so do not try to edit it manually. The target is to have this kind of registry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registr.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the registry of your PC is blank if you access that key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the registry for our aim can be done in a safe and easy mode using the freeware named KeyTweak!  &lt;br /&gt;
http://webpages.charter.net/krumsick/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can download the file also directly form here: [[Media:KeyTweak_install.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this utility you can modify the keyboard layout in a simple way.&lt;br /&gt;
Just download the software, install it (after the mapping you can de-install it) and run the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KeyTweak.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how to swap the keys using KeyTweak:&lt;br /&gt;
Press “Full Teach Mode” then press “7” first and then “1” and then select “swap”, then do it vice versa and then with 8 and 9. &lt;br /&gt;
The results are displayed in the “Pending Changes”. When finished all 6 entries press “Apply”. After rebooting the PC the new Keyboard Layout is active. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like to have the the “normal” Keyboard Layout back just use KeyTweak again and select “Restore All Defaults” or manually clear the registry entry (and in both cases boot the PC again).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As explained the new map is done in the basement of the operating system and so the new layout works in each application (just start Word and try it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the registry is modified the PC will permanently have the new layout. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep the utility on the PC; you can delete it after use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=16903</id>
		<title>Howto:Callmonitor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:Callmonitor&amp;diff=16903"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T14:59:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* innovaphone PBX version 6 or higher&lt;br /&gt;
* PC with windows XP or higher&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: BLF CBLF busy lamp field operator classic busy lampf field Call Monitor Callmonitor CM Call-Monitor--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone Callmonitor is a Busy Lamp Field which shows the status of up to 400 extensions in one window. The layout is “classic”, like in hardware solutions each extension is displayed with its number. No interaction is foreseen, just the status displayed. The status and colors are like in the innovaphone operator, yellow for call setup, red for alerting and green for connected. All type of extensions are displayed (innovaphone IP-Phones, IP-Dect, analogue sets, 3rd party IP-Phones).  The application can work on the same PC as the operator. Being an independent application it is possible to show the Callmonitor even on a second monitor (extended desktop). In this manner the operator has the entire screen available for the operator and on the second screen the Callmonitor (busy lamp field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callmonitor is freeware and innovaphone is not liable for any use, it will be at your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor shows the following call status:&lt;br /&gt;
Call Setup (lifting the receiver or pressing “R” in a conversation), in the example extension 37 has lifted up the receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_CallSetup.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling, in the example extension 37 is calling extension 36. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Calling.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connected, in the example 37 is now talking to 36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_connect.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If in a active window a Lamp is marked with the cursor an automatic popup shows the name of the lamp:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_Namen.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multi Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application can be started multiple times on the same PC and even allows the monitoring of different PBXes. The windows can be arranged nearby and this way show the whole situation. Each window can be named to identify the PBX. The following example shows the locations Sindelfingen and Verona.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF_fenster.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autosize and Storeposition:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dimension of the Callmonitor depends on how many extensions there are in the PBX. The dimension of the table (window) depends on the number of lamps, both, revealing of lamps and sizing of the windows is done automatically, no configuration is needed. &lt;br /&gt;
The first time the Callmonitor is started on the windows default starting position (typically in the center of a screen), If the window is moved to a position this will be stored and if the application starts again the window will be on the same position. This also works for the extended desktop and therefore the Callmonitor can be “anchored“ on a defined screen position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range limitation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to limit the range of the displayed extension in the setup.  If for example “300” is configured in the “up to” and “500” is configured in the “from” the Callmonitor will only display user in the range between “300” and “500”. This can also be used  for scenarios that display more than 400 users, just split the extension in two ranges and start the application twice (from different directories).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
Download the application [[Media:CallMonitor.zip]] and save it on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
The software does not have to be installed, just copy the .exe file into a directory and start it. Automatic startup with the PC can be done doing this file in the auto start folder. The configuration and transitory data are stored in simple text files in the same directory of the application. No registry entry is done and therefore de-installation means just deleting all files in the directory. When you start the application the first time of course all fields will be empty, start the setup and then the application again. If for any reason after a setup the installation does not work anymore because of bad configuration data just delete the configuration file (innoDynaBLF.txt). You can also edit the file manually (for example change the IP address). The start position on the screen is saved in a text file called DynaBLFPos.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to monitor more PBX then you have to create more directories and copy the application in all of them. Now configure each Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
The setup is quite simple. All fields have a tooltip message that explains the meaning. The filed “IP address”, “User”, “Password” and “Query User” is the same as in the operator. Remember that “User” and “Password” is intended as the Admin access to the PBX while the “Query User” is just a dummy user on which the SOAP is working (typically in innovaphone PBX it will be named “_TAPI_”, but this is just an arbitrary choice without any meaning).&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor also supports a standby PBX, if the connection with the main PBX is lost a standby connection will be set up automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
The name of a Callmonitor session is displayed on top of the window, if left blank in the configuration it will be displayed “innovaphone Callmonitor”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:cBLF02.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the flag “Show only registrated user” is unselected (default) extensions with no registration in the PBX are also displayed. The numbers that are not registered are displayed with white numbers instead of black ones. Please note that only during startup the registration status will be revealed. The status will change if a user who is not registered has been successfully called or is calling. Deregistration during runtime will not be displayed. So if you have users who use the registration feature in normal operations then you should choose this option.&lt;br /&gt;
Note also that in case of multiple registrations or twinning just one number will be displayed. If one of the “numbers” is busy the lamp shows busy and only if both are idle the lamp will switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
The flag “Show all lamps” is more for demo use, all lamps (400) are displayed, “empty” lamps have a label like “L168” (lamp 168).&lt;br /&gt;
The display range can be limited using “Hide user up to” and/or “Hide user higher then”. This could be useful for many reasons, for example 400 lamps are not enough. In this case the “first” Callmonitor can display extensions “up to” and the second one “from”.&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that after the setup the Callmonitor has to be started again, configuration changes are not executed in runtime. On the other hand the setup is so simple and unique that typically after one try the setup is done. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Call Monitor for Version 8==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.10 of the Call Monitor supports the innovaphone version 8 features, you can download this version here [[Media:CallMonitor_V110.zip]].&lt;br /&gt;
You can use that version also for older versions of the innovaphone PBX but some of the following features may not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presence Status===&lt;br /&gt;
Call Monitor 1.10 support the presence status feature. If an extension has a presence status switched on or/and a note inserted, the Call Monitor will show that by changing the idle status background color form silver to white and the extension is displayed in navy blue instead of black.&lt;br /&gt;
If the mouse pointer is on the label the call status and the note text (if available) is displayed after the extension and name like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1101.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is updated from the PBX in the moment of the start-up of the application and then synchronized in real-time. There will be a short delay of about 2 seconds in synchronizing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Call Diversion===&lt;br /&gt;
Like the presence status an unconditional call forward is also displayed. If more than one CFU is on the first one is displayed. An active CFU is indicated with a “ &amp;gt;” after the number. If the mouse pointer is on the label the CFU status is displayed after the extension like in the following example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1102.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course all the combinations of call-status are possible. The following example shows extension 36 with a CFU active; extension 24 is busy, 37 too and has also a presence message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V1103.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Configuration in V8===&lt;br /&gt;
To get in real-time the configuration changes from the PBX it is necessary create a group in the PBX (for example “SOAP”) and put all the interested extensions in. Do NOT put mark the active flag (because this causes heavy senseless CFU traffic). Now put also the query user in that group and mark the active flag (so that object will receive all the configuration changes).&lt;br /&gt;
The query user in the following example is “_TAPI_”:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:V11099.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the software version of the call monitor is shown in the Setup window header (v1.10). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
The Callmonitor can be installed independently from an operator and so theoretically on any PC in an installation. But consider that each Callmonitor will open a SOAP session (and so an http session). Now the innovaphone PBX interface is not designed to handle many SOAP sessions. So a Callmonitor is NOT a CTI application to install on each PBX user (of course yes if there are just 10 users). CTI application uses a central server which setup one SOAP connection and then distributes the information to the clients. This is not implemented in this first version of the Callmonitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16902</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16902"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T14:31:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into hands free mode (and just dials the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires a low kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country, area and town code are not necessary. In Italy, for example, there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of your phone if, for example, you change your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial sends information to you phone user and password is required. An input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
If you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rd party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software requires Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information like fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 includes some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example “Q” is indicated in the configuration the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard, the second character triggers the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function first. This is done simply by pressing the configured short cut twice, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text with the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so the click to dial can also be used in Excel to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” at least 200ms should pass, so try not to be too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dial out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16901</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16901"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T13:48:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into the hands free mode (and dial out just the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires few kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country Area and Town code are not necessary. In Italy for example there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of you Phone if you change for example your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial send information to you phone user and password is required. A input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
When you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rt party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software require Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information’s like Fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 include some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example in the configuration is indicated “Q” the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the market text to the clipboard, the second character trigger the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function fist. This is done simply pressing twice the configured short cut, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text witch the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so also in Excel can be used the click to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” should pass at least 200ms, so try to be not too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dialed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16900</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16900"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T13:41:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantiee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into the hands free mode (and dial out just the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires few kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will end stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows the setting of parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
A screen similar to this one will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on them, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type in “00” like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If a uniformed national dialling plan works in your country Area and Town code are not necessary. In Italy for example there is such a uniformed dialling plan and therefore those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those fields have to be filled out, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This way the software understands that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this simple setup press the save and exit button and end the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of you Phone if you change for example your location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information is stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial send information to you phone user and password is required. A input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
When you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rt party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software require Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information’s like Fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 include some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example in the configuration is indicated “Q” the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the market text to the clipboard, the second character trigger the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function fist. This is done simply pressing twice the configured short cut, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text witch the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so also in Excel can be used the click to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” should pass at least 200ms, so try to be not too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dialed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16899</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16899"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T13:28:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantiee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into the hands free mode (and dial out just the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires few kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with the telephone number in and press CTRL+C and C again (hold the CTRL key down until you have pressed the “C” button twice).  Your IP-Phone will switch to the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds the dialled number also appears in the upper left corner or in the taskbar. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone keypad (which is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In some countries the CTRL key has got a different name(for example in Germany:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will terminate (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows setting the parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
It will appear a screen similar this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type “00” in like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If in you country is working a uniformed national dialling plan Area and Town code are not necessary. In Italy for example there is such a uniformed dialling plan and thereforey those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those field has to be filled up, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this way the software understand that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done this simple setup press the save and exit button and terminate the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of you Phone if you change for example you location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information’s are stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial send information to you phone user and password is required. A input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
When you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rt party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software require Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information’s like Fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 include some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example in the configuration is indicated “Q” the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the market text to the clipboard, the second character trigger the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function fist. This is done simply pressing twice the configured short cut, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text witch the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so also in Excel can be used the click to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” should pass at least 200ms, so try to be not too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dialed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16898</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16898"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T13:22:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantiee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note though that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark the beginning or the number exactly, the software will analyse the marked text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will find and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be canceled and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will also add a trunk access number. So following the example the real dialled number will be 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial does not detect any number nothing will happen and the IP-Phone will not go into the hands free mode (and dial out just the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want the software to start automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC boots ClickToDial is also on and available. Please note that this application is very small and only requires few kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the application is launched this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point the mouse on the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with then telephone number in and press CTRL+C and again C (hold the CTRL Key down until you press twice the “C” button).  Your IP-Phone will go in the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds also in the upper left corner or in the taskbar appears the number dialled out. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone Keypad (witch is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The CTRL key in some countries (for example in Germany) is named different:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will terminate (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows setting the parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
It will appear a screen similar this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type “00” in like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If in you country is working a uniformed national dialling plan Area and Town code are not necessary. In Italy for example there is such a uniformed dialling plan and thereforey those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those field has to be filled up, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this way the software understand that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done this simple setup press the save and exit button and terminate the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of you Phone if you change for example you location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information’s are stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial send information to you phone user and password is required. A input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
When you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rt party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software require Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information’s like Fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 include some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example in the configuration is indicated “Q” the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the market text to the clipboard, the second character trigger the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function fist. This is done simply pressing twice the configured short cut, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text witch the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so also in Excel can be used the click to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” should pass at least 200ms, so try to be not too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dialed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16897</id>
		<title>Howto:ClickToDial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.innovaphone.com/index.php?title=Howto:ClickToDial&amp;diff=16897"/>
		<updated>2010-03-26T12:56:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Twa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Applies To==&lt;br /&gt;
This information applies to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Keywords: Click-to-Dial Click to dial CTI --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More Information==&lt;br /&gt;
innovaphone ClickToDial is an application that allows calling a number marked on the screen of the PC using an IP-Phone.&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is able to read numbers from almost any web-browser (Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome tested), Word, Notepad, Outlook (Exchange), PowerPoint, Acrobat and many other applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that innovaphone ClickToDial is freeware, innovaphone will not respond to claims or any damages and will not guarantiee any support. Using this application is on your own risk.&lt;br /&gt;
The innovaphone ClickToDial is a first party application interfacing the phone and not the PBX. Therefore an innovaphone IP-Phone is required (IP110/200/230/240/150).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can download the application [[Media:ClickToDial.zip]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this application is addressed to the end-user you can also find a small user manual here, in German [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_de.pdf]]     and in Italian [[Media:UserManual_ClickToDial_it.pdf]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Details===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial searches in the clipboard of your PC for a number, correct it and send the number to your innovaphone IP-Phone. To launch the call just mark the number on the screen and click CTRL+C+C. The first CTRL+C will copy the marked text to the clipboard and the second “C” starts the application and data transmission. &lt;br /&gt;
Copy text to the clipboard using CTRL+C is a system feature of windows and works from nearly all applications. Please note anyway that ClickToDial will not work with Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to mark exactly the beginning or the number, the software will analyse the marked Text up to 200 characters starting from the first marked letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Nummer.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example ClickToDial will found and correct the number. Particular characters in numbers like space, slash and similar are skipped. &lt;br /&gt;
The software also respects the international syntax for phone numbers, for example&lt;br /&gt;
+49(7031)73009-0 will be translated in 00497031730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If you are located in Germany the country code will be cancel and the detected number will be 07031730090, and if you are located in Sindelfingen (area code = 07031) it will be 730090. &lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial will add also a trunk access number. So the real dialled number will be following the example 0730090. &lt;br /&gt;
If ClickToDial will not detect any number no action will happen, and so the IP-Phone will not go into the hands free mode (and dial out just the trunk access code).&lt;br /&gt;
All dialled numbers are threaded from the Phone like manually dialled numbers and so you will for example find the dialled number in your Phone memory.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you must set parameters in the setup as explained in the installation section.&lt;br /&gt;
===Using ClickToDial===&lt;br /&gt;
To start ClickToDial just double click the application, no installation is necessary. If you want that the software starts automatically with the PC just copy ClickToDial in the autostart directory of your PC. So each time the PC is booting also ClickToDial is on and available. Please note that this application is very small and will require just some kByte of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once launched the application this is shown in the task bar and you will see an icon indicating that the software is running (small fish in the “click” icon).  &lt;br /&gt;
If you point with the mouse in the icon you will see the name of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Icon.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now just select (mark) the text on your PC-screen with then telephone number in and press CTRL+C and again C (hold the CTRL Key down until you press twice the “C” button).  Your IP-Phone will go in the hands free mode and dial out. For a few seconds also in the upper left corner or in the taskbar appears the number dialled out. The rest of the operations like release or redial is done using the phone Keypad (witch is much better than any software solution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The CTRL key in some countries (for example in Germany) is named different:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Tastatur.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the CTRL-Key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you point to the ClickToDial icon and click the right mouse button a small menu appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Exit” will terminate (stop) the application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Info” will show you the release number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Setup” allows setting the parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
„Drop Call“ drops the call done by ClickToDial. This function is useful for example if a call has been started erroneously with ClickToDial, but now you are not near the IP-Phone to cancel the call using the Phone keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation/Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
For the setup just select the menu item “Setup” as described before.&lt;br /&gt;
It will appear a screen similar this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that on the input fields you will see tooltips if the mouse is pointed on, this small online help will give you some more information about the meaning of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the address of your IP-Phone. &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for the external line is the number you have to dial to get an external trunk line (typically 0). &lt;br /&gt;
The prefix for international calls is more or less equal all over the world, just type “00” in like in the example. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note to insert your country code without the 00 prefix, so 49 for Germany and not 0049 (in the example you see 39 for Italy).&lt;br /&gt;
If in you country is working a uniformed national dialling plan Area and Town code are not necessary. In Italy for example there is such a uniformed dialling plan and thereforey those fields have to be empty like in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But in Germany for example those field has to be filled up, here the example for Sindelfingen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CtD_Setup02.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this way the software understand that 0049(7099)xxx has to be converted in 07099xxx and a number like 07031xxx has to be converted in just xxxx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done this simple setup press the save and exit button and terminate the setup. The changed configuration is available on runtime and so the new parameters are immediately effective. This allows you to change on the fly the IP address of you Phone if you change for example you location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setup information’s are stored in the registry user area of your PC. That means that for different users on the same PC individual profiles possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Login and Security===&lt;br /&gt;
The first time ClickToDial send information to you phone user and password is required. A input mask will appear automatically. After this first authentication no more user/passwords are required until ClickToDial and the Phone is running (the session is on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note===&lt;br /&gt;
When you dont want to login each time the phone is started you can change the ip in the setup to: username:password@ip of the phone like you can see in the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Clicktodialnologin.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
ClickToDial is designed for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* IP110&lt;br /&gt;
* IP200&lt;br /&gt;
* IP230&lt;br /&gt;
* IP240&lt;br /&gt;
* IP150&lt;br /&gt;
Build 60900 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No 3rt party IP-Phones, DECT, Softphone or analogue terminal adapter are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software require Microsoft OS XP (tested) or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
In Excel it is not possible to dial-out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that numbers embedded in graphic information’s like Fax scans, pictures or similar will fail (no OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has to know the IP-Address and a valid user/password to access the phone. The password level has to be Administrator (no Viewer). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Version 1.01==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 include some minor functions based on request from users (TT 43118 and 50405).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version 1.01 can be downloaded here: [[Media:ClickToDialV101.zip‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurable short cut===&lt;br /&gt;
The “second” key can be defined in the setup. If nothing is indicated “C” is assumed and so for dialing the procedure is as described CTRL+C+C. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If for example in the configuration is indicated “Q” the sequence for dialing out is CTRL+C+Q. The first CTRL+C will copy the market text to the clipboard, the second character trigger the dialing out function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dialing form the clipboard===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a short cut is defined it is also possible to dial out from the clipboard without doing the CTRL+C copy function fist. This is done simply pressing twice the configured short cut, so in our example CTRL+Q+Q will trigger the event; the clipboard is searched and if a number is found it will be dialed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That functionality makes it possible to copy a text witch the mouse to the clipboard and then dial out. And so also in Excel can be used the click to dial, just select the cell, press the right mouse button and select “copy”. Then press CTRL+Q+Q.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that between the two “Q” should pass at least 200ms, so try to be not too fast. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mask the national number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some carriers don’t like a number with the national prefix if you are in your country. In this version if a number includes your national prefix it will not dialed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handle internal numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can define the length of internal numbers, if a number is shorter than the indicated value no external prefix will be added. Also internal numbers can be dialed using the click to dial function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Related Articles == --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Howto|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Twa</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>